AV Pre-Amplifier
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 122
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 124
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 82
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
CONFIGURATIONS
95
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
APPENDIX
137
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
En
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
En
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
Remote control
Batteries (x4)
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
AAA, LR03, UM-4
Insert the batteries the right way
round.
AM antenna
FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
YPAO microphone
Microphone base
Power cable
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise
specified.
*Using for angle measurement
during YPAO.
*The supplied power cable varies
depending on the region of purchase.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
•
•
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
Accessories
En
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
Supports 2- to 11-channel pre-out and up to 2
subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
• USB
. p.68
. p.72
. p.75
. p.78
. p.80
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.41
• Media server (PC/NAS)
• Internet radio
• AirPlay
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.56
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.60
Control
Network contents
Speakers
Audio (via power amplifier)
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
3D and Ultra HD (4K) signals supported
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
Audio/Video
TV
BD/DVD player
Control
AV receiver (the unit)
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
Smartphone/Tablet
. p.150
TV remote control
. p.53
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full of useful functions!
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.93).
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.109).
BD/DVD
player
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.114).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
Set-top box
Game
console
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
❑ Controlling other Yamaha products in
Camcorder
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40).
TV
conjunction with operating the unit (p.39)
The trigger function enables you to control other
Yamaha products (such as power amplifiers and
subwoofers) in conjunction with operating the unit.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
signals.
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.127). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.136).
❑ DAC Digital Filter (p.111)
You can select the digital filter type of the audio DAC
(digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite sounds.
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following
pages.
❑ Operating external devices with the
supplied remote control (p.128)
HDMI Control
TV audio
You can operate external devices with the supplied
remote control by registering the remote control codes
of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD
players).
• Input settings (p.95)
• SCENE settings (p.98)
Video from
external device
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.101)
❑ Backlight illumination remote control
The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate
the remote control even in a dark home theater room.
• Various function settings (p.104)
❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android device
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.123)
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the
Yamaha website for details.
• System settings (p.124)
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CINEMA DSP
Optimizing speaker settings
for the environment (YPAO)
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these
experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and
this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze
the environment so that this information can be used to
automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and
the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the
content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes
the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating
technology for your specific listening environment.
What is a sound field?
CINEMA DSP HD3
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not
only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as
the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been
reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The
character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building,
and all of these sounds taken together are what give us
the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of
acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of
concert halls and performance spaces around the
world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to
create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of
sound programs using CINEMA DSP.
YPAO-R.S.C.
In rooms that have not been designed or constructed
with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or
ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred
low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical
image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only
the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in
a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and
inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to
speaker placement, thus creating a listening
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the
content of the playback source such as movies, music,
or games, you can maximize the acoustical
effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a
sound program designed for movies can give you the
sensation of actually being in that scene.)
In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses
3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of
height, generating an even more realistic sound field
with a spatial sense.
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is
what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field
environment comparable to that of a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
“CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field
playback technology that takes full advantage of the
massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in
the sound field data. With support for rear presence
speaker output, it delivers more than twice as much
capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to
Level
Compensation
Time
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly
natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Angle measurement
Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
The direction (angle) of the front
speakers, surround speakers,
and presence speakers as seen
from the listening position is
measured, and compensation
is applied to the sound field in
order to maximize the
effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field.
CINEMA DSP HD³
CINEMA DSP 3D
Microphone base
Time
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unrivaled audio and video quality
High-resolution music enhancer
Expandable to meet diverse needs
The best expandability in Yamaha
Multi-zone function
By connecting a power amplifier, you can enjoy the
highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel
3-dimensional sound field.
The multi-zone function (p.82) allows you to play back
different input sources in the room where the unit is
installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can
be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a
CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening
of the musicality in the original content (p.93)
(The following shows examples of use.)
Power amplifier
Before processing
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living
room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a
different room.
Frequency
After processing
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
Living room (main zone)
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room
(HDMI connection)
Frequency
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living
room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via
HDMI on a TV in a different room.
• Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and
unbalanced connections)
High-quality video processing
• High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced
pre-out)
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc)
images, any content can be played back as a
high-quality image (p.111).
CD player
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each
input source
Living room (main zone)
You can also apply fine touches such as detail
enhancement and edge enhancement.
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names and functions
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.11).
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.113)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.114)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.115)
• An iPod is being charged (p.68)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.12).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Inside of the front panel door
9
0
AB
C
D E
F
GH
I J
K
L
M
N
O
P
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
G MULTI ZONE keys
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.35, 36) or a smartphone (p.35).
ZONE 2–4
Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.87).
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.87).
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
H INFO key
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.90).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62).
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.89).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.61).
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.91).
Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.88).
K PRESET keys
L TUNING keys
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.72) or an iPod
(p.68).
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41).
F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.53).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front display (indicators)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HD
STEREO TUNED
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT1 OUT2
PL
L C R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1
SW2 SR
3
HD
PL SBL SB SBR PR
(U.S.A. model)
9
0
A B
B
C
1 HDMI
5 Information display
C Channel indicators
Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are
output.
A Front (L)
S Front (R)
D Center
F Surround (L)
G Surround (R)
H Surround back (L)
J Surround back (R)
K Surround back
Z Front/rear presence (L)
X Front/rear presence (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.89).
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
6 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
7 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
2 STEREO
8 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.91) is working.
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
9 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is
working.
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
HD
0 CINEMA DSP indicator
(U.S.A. model only)
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.56) is
working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP
HD³ is activated.
Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station
signal.
3 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.87).
A SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
4 PARTY
B Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.88)
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear panel
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
(U.S.A. model)
HDMI
AV
RS-232C
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(
3
)
NET
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
1
2
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
(1 BD/DVD)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
TRIGGER
OUT
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
PR
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
P
B
PR
IN
OUT
AV
B
2
AV
12V
0.1A
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(2 TV)
L
1
2
L
R
R
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(4 RADIO)
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
FRONT
SURROUND
BACK
CENTER
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
HD Radio
AC IN
75Ω
FM
AM
SURROUND
PRE OUT
CENTER
AUDIO
4
REAR
FRONT
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
BACK
FRONT
REAR
R
L
R
R
R
R
R
FRONT
L
FRONT
L
SURROUND
L
L
L
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.34).
7 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video)
jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a zone
video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.84).
2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
3 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.37).
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.85).
B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.86).
4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.32).
9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.32).
C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.39).
5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.38).
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.32).
D RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(composite video/S-video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or
S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting
to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.84).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(U.S.A. model)
HDMI
AV
RS-232C
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
(
3
)
NET
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
1
2
ARC
(1 BD/DVD)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
TRIGGER
OUT
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
PR
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
P
B
PR
IN
OUT
AV
B
2
AV
12V
0.1A
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(2 TV)
L
1
2
L
R
R
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(4 RADIO)
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
FRONT
SURROUND
BACK
CENTER
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
HD Radio
AC IN
75Ω
FM
AM
SURROUND
PRE OUT
CENTER
AUDIO
4
REAR
FRONT
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
BACK
FRONT
REAR
R
L
R
R
R
R
R
FRONT
L
FRONT
L
SURROUND
L
L
L
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
E AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.34).
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.38).
J PRE OUT (RCA) jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.25) or
to a power amplifier (p.25).
F AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.34).
I ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.83).
K PRE OUT (XLR) jacks
For connecting to a power amplifier (p.24).
L AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).
G ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
1
2
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
SOURCE RECEIVER
2 SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
SOURCE/RECEIVER key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.70).
(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program
(p.63).
3
Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.130). You can operate
the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external
device when this key lights up in green.
AV
1
5
2
6
2
3
7
3
4
V-AUX
4
A PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).
AUDIO
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
4
1
B TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.129).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
[ A ]
USB
[ B ]
NET
[ C ]
3 Display window
Displays remote control information.
SCENE
C VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
4 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
1
2
3
4
5
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AV 1–7 jacks
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
D MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
6
C
D
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
E OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.90).
PHONO
MULTI
USB
PHONO jacks
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB jack (on the front panel)
NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
FM/AM radio
POP-UP/MENU
7
8
F LIGHT key
Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10
seconds.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
E
F
NET
ENTER
9
TUNER
G DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.89).
[A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the
remote control without switching the input
source.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
G
H
H Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.55).
5 SCENE keys
:
7
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.53).
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
A
B
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.55).
MOVIE
TV
STEREO
TV CH
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
7 External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices (p.130).
TV VOL
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Inside of the remote control cover
I Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.55).
SOURCE RECEIVER
J INFO key
K Numeric keys
AV
1
5
1
2
6
2
3
7
3
4
V-AUX
4
L ZONE key
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.87).
AUDIO
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
[ A ]
USB
[ B ]
NET
[ C ]
M PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.88).
SCENE
N HDMI OUT key
1
2
3
4
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.52).
O Radio keys
PROGRAM
MUTE
VOLUME
Operate the FM/AM radio (p.61).
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
FM
AM
TUN./CH
Switches to FM radio.
Switches to AM radio.
Select the radio frequency.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
OPTION
P SLEEP key
ENTER
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
RETURN
SUR.
DISPLAY
M
N
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
I
J
DECODE
Q LEVEL key
Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.108).
INFO
R SETUP key
Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.128).
O
1
2
3
TUN./ CH
4
5
6
K
L
7
8
9
SLEEP
P
Q
R
ENT
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.128).
10
0
LEVEL
SETUP
ZONE
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the power amplifier. For details on speaker
connections, refer to the instruction manual for the power amplifier.
1
2
Placing speakers (p.18)
Connecting the power amplifier and
subwoofers (p.24)
Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
Connect a TV to the unit.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connecting a TV (p.26)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Connect the unit to a network.
Connecting playback devices (p.32)
Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36)
Connecting to a network (p.37)
Connecting other devices (p.38)
Connecting the power cable (p.39)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.40)
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.41)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
10
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
PREPARATIONS
➤
General setup procedure
En 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
1 Placing speakers
The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2- to 11-channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your
room.
You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.82).
Functions of each speaker
Ideal speaker layout
Speaker type
Front (L)
Abbr.
1
2
Function
E
R
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R)
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).
Center
3
1
2
1.8 m
1.8 m
Surround (L)
Surround (R)
4
5
Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.
(5.9 ft)
(5.9 ft)
9
3
9
Surround back (L)
Surround back (R)
Front presence (L)
Front presence (R)
Rear presence (L)
Rear presence (R)
6
7
E
R
T
Y
Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD³ (p.56), the presence speakers create a natural
3-dimensional sound field in your room.
4
5
10°~30°
10°~30°
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
Subwoofer
9
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.
T
Y
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
6
7
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Placing speakers
En 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
❑ 11.2-channel system
❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers)
E
R
E
R
1
2
1
2
9
3
9
9
3
9
4
5
4
5
T
Y
T
Y
6
7
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.87), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the
main zone.
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.87), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the
main zone.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Placing speakers
En 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers)
❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
E
R
1
2
9
3
9
4
5
6
7
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows
you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
❑ 5.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for
enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Placing speakers
En 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ Front 5.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
❑ 2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Placing speakers
En 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
1
AV
HDMI cable
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
COMPONEN
1
AV
A
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ S VIDEO jack
Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)
and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video
cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and Ultra HD (4K) video transmission
features.
Digital coaxial cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or Ultra HD (4K) videos.
S-video cable
❑ HDMI/MHL jack
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable or an audio pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable).
MHL cable
Stereo pin cable
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Video pin cable
AV
1
• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL
connection” (p.35).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Input/output jacks and cables
En 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ XLR jacks
About the XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced
cable.
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR input jacks
XLR output jacks
XLR balanced cable (male)
1. GND
2. HOT
2. HOT
1. GND
4
O
I
D
AU
R
3. COLD
3. COLD
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH
button on the unit and then pull the connector out.
XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (female)
PRE OUT
CENTER
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of
the connector and then pull it out.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Input/output jacks and cables
En 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
■ Balanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (XLR) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables.
Connecting a power amplifier
Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that
the audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback.
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel
depending on the input jacks available on your power amplifier.
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify
that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23).
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals.
The unit (rear)
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections.
PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks
Power amplifier
Speaker
connections
(Female connector)
XLR
(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
En 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
■ Unbalanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (RCA) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced
cables).
Connecting subwoofers
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT 1–2 jacks
of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables).
The unit (rear)
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
9
9
The unit (rear)
Power amplifier
Main input
(RCA)
Speaker
connections
PRE OUT
(RCA) jacks
• Only unbalanced connections are available for subwoofers.
• You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.
When using 2 subwoofers, configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.108) in the “Setup” menu after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
En 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
3 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.113) in the “Setup” menu.
Yes
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
■ Connection Method 1 (p.26)
HDMI OUT 1 jack
No
HDMI OUT
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
(E OUT)
HDMI
Yes
Does your TV support
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
■ Connection Method 3 (p.29)
HDMI Control?
HDMI
ARC
No
HDMI
Yes
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
No
TV
■ Connection Method 4 (p.30)
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.150).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.148).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
3
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
1
Configure the settings of the unit.
2
e Check the following.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press ON SCREEN.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
ON SCREEN
OPTION
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
This completes the necessary settings.
RETURN
DISPLAY
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set
to “On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).
e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
h Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
1
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.113) in the “Setup” menu.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 1 jack
Configure the settings of the unit.
2
HDMI OUT
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
OUT)
HDMI
HDMI input
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
HDMI
ENTER
HDMI
RETURN
DISPLAY
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
L
L
R
R
R
5
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
O
O
AUDIO 1
Audio output
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.148).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
3
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
HDMI OUT 1 jack
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
HDMI OUT
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
OUT)
HDMI
HDMI input
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
HDMI
HDMI
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
L
L
R
This completes the necessary settings.
R
R
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
5
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
O
O
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
AUDIO 1
Audio output
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.148).
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–3
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following
connections.
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
The unit (rear)
S
Video input (S-video)
S VIDEO
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog
Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.148).
S
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
L
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–3
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
R
R
R
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
TV
5
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
O
O
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO 1
Audio output
P
R
B
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
P
Y
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
Video input
(component video)
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
V
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
The unit (rear)
P
Y
Video input (S-video)
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
VIDEO
V
L
L
R
R
R
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
TV
5
OPTICAL
L
L
R
OPTICAL
R
R
O
O
TV
5
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
OPTICAL
O
O
AUDIO 1
Audio output
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.52).
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
TV
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI input
HDMI
Projector
TV (already connected)
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.85).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
4 Connecting playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
• Connecting an iPod (p.68)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.72)
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Video
Audio
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
Component video
AV 1–4
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,
D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
P
Y
Video output
(component video)
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.93) in the “Option” menu.
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
P
Y
The unit (rear)
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
C
C
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
Video device
O
O
L
HDMI output
L
L
HDMI
R
HDMI
R
R
HDMI
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
■ S-video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Audio
Video
Audio
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
S-video
Composite video
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
AV 1–4
(S VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(S-video)
V
Video output
(composite video)
S
VIDEO
S
V
S VIDEO
C
C
O
C
C
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
Video device
Video device
O
O
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
R
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
PHONO
GND
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
GND
Ground lead
The unit
(rear)
PHONO
L
L
L
L
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
R
R
R
R
Turntable
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23).
C
O
C
COAXIAL
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.93) in the “Option” menu.
Audio device
O
OPTICAL
L
Audio output jacks on audio device
Audio input jacks on the unit
L
L
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
Digital coaxial
R
R
R
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital optical
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
XLR
Analog stereo (RCA)
(Female
connector)
Analog stereo (XLR)
Turntable (PHONO)
AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR])
PHONO
XLR
(Male connector)
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA],
AUDIO [XLR]) jacks
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ MHL connection
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input
videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.68) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.72).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output to the
TV by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.96) in the “Input” menu.
MHL
❑ HDMI connection
The unit (front)
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
MHL output
MHL
HDMI
Mobile device
The unit (front)
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.
Game console
Camcorder
• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.
• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
• If “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on
the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the
unit.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable).
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.
FM antenna
AM antenna
V
L
R
O
The unit (front)
Game console
The unit (rear)
Camcorder
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL
IN) jack.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
En 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Assembling the AM antenna
6 Connecting to a network
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Internet
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
WAN
LAN
PC
Connecting the AM antenna
Modem
Hold down
Insert
Release
Router
Network cable
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
The unit (rear)
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.115).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting to a network
En 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
7 Connecting other devices
Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.
You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
The unit (rear)
• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
VIDEO
The unit (rear)
AV OUT
V
V
Channel output
MULTI CH INPUT
S VIDEO
AUDIO
CENTER
(Center)
S
S
(Subwoofer)
L
L
L
Video/audio
recording device
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
(Surround
back)
R
R
R
L
MULTI CH
INPUT jacks
R
L
OPTICAL
Device with analog
multi-channel output
(Surround)
(Front)
O
O
R
L
R
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.96) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting other devices
En 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
8 Connecting the power cable
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a
Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input
jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
Power amplifier
TRIGGER OUT
Trigger In
(+12V)
(such as
Yamaha MX-A5000)
1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
To an AC wall outlet
System
connection
input
Yamaha
subwoofer
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.120) in the
“Setup” menu.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the power cable
En 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
SOURCE RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
6
7
V-AUX
D
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1
2
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Press ON SCREEN.
3
4
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
5
PREPARATIONS
➤
Selecting an on-screen menu language
En 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
SOURCE RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
5
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
YPAO MIC
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
The unit (front)
jack
YPAO MIC
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
E
R
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
1
2
ON SCREEN
OPTION
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
ENTER
3
9
9
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
YPAO
4
5
microphone
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
MOVIE
STEREO
1
2
3
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Ear height
Turn on the power amplifier.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
(The microphone direction is not
considered.)
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
4
CROSSOVER/
VOLUME
HIGH CUT
9
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
The following screen appears on the TV.
❑ Multi Position
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Selects multi measure or single measure.
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
Settings
Select this option if you will have several listening
ON SCREEN
OPTION
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions
in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to
suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).
If desired, select the measuring options.
6
Yes
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.42) or “Angle”
(p.43) and press ENTER.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
No (default)
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the
key in orange) and then use the cursor keys.
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
TV VOL
TV CH
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.46)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.44)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
❑ Angle
Enables/disables the angle measurement.
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Single measure
d
e
a
bac
Settings
Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure
Multi measure
Multi measure
angle of each speaker at the listening position and
correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP
can create more effective sound fields.
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)
Yes
No (default) Disables the angle measurement.
b
a
d
c
d
c
e
a
b
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
(When angle measurement is enabled)
SOURCE RECEIVER
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Proceed to Step 2.
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 5 minutes).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.50) or “Warning messages” (p.51).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Perform the angle measurement.
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
2
1
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and
set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
(When angle measurement is disabled)
PURE
Microphone
base
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Proceed to Step 3.
FRONT
DIRECTION
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement
finishes.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
SOURCE RECEIVER
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
4
5
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle
measurement finishes.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
Caution
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
3
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.48).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
SOURCE RECEIVER
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
(When angle measurement is disabled)
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Proceed to Step 5.
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.50) or “Warning messages” (p.51).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
1
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
(When angle measurement is enabled)
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
Proceed to Step 4.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
2
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
SOURCE RECEIVER
Perform the angle measurement.
positions “2” and “3”.
4
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle
measurement finishes.
b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you
will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to
the position “1”.
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Microphone
base
FRONT
DIRECTION
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
6
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.48).
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement
finishes.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
TV VOL
TV CH
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
SOURCE RECEIVER
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
7
2
Polarity of each speaker
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
Wiring
Size
correct polarity (+/-).
Caution
V-AUX
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
D
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Checking the measurement results
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
Distance
Level
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Output level adjustment for each speaker
ON SCREEN
OPTION
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
1
Angle
Angle of each speaker at the listening position
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
• If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier
settings and connections.
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
3
1
2
3
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
SOURCE RECEIVER
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
V-AUX
D
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.103).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
2
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
MOVIE
STEREO
3
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
Remedy
E-1: No Front SP
E-2: No Sur. SP
E-3: No F.PRNS SP
Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the corresponding speakers).
(This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the power amplifier is turned off.)
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-4: SBR → SBL
E-5: Noisy
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-6: Check Sur.
E-7: No MIC
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-8: No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
E-9: User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-10: Internal Error
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the rear presence speakers).
E-11: No R.PRNS SP
One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
W-1: Out of Phase
Cause
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.48) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect
the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even
if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Check the pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the power amplifier. If they are not compatible with the pin
assignments of the unit (p.23), change the pin assignment setting of the power amplifier or use unbalanced
(RCA) connections.
The pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the unit and power
amplifier are not same.
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.48) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-2: Over Distance
W-3: Level Error
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Input selection keys
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
1
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
2
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
VOLUME
DOCK
TAG
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
3
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE
HDMIꢀOUTꢀSel.
ꢀꢀꢀOUTꢀ1+2
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
ON SCREEN
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
OUT 1+2
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
OUT 1
OUT 2
Off
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
• Playing back iPod music (p.68)
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
AM
DECODE
HDMI OUT
INFO
TUN./ CH
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.72)
SLEEP
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.75)
ENT
LEVEL
SETUP
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.53).
ZONE
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.78)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.80)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.118), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
4
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.91).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
PLAYBACK
➤
Basic playback procedure
En 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
V-AUX
D
Press SCENE.
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Input
1 (BD/DVD)
AV 1
2 (TV)
AUDIO 1
Auto
3 (NET)
NET RADIO
—
4 (RADIO)
TUNER
—
ON SCREEN
Input (p.52)
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Audio Select (p.93)
HDMI Output (p.52)
Sound Program (p.55)
Enhancer (p.60)
Auto
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
HDMI Output
OUT 1+2
Sci-Fi
Auto
OUT 1+2
STRAIGHT
Auto
OUT 1+2
11ch Stereo
Auto
OUT 1+2
11ch Stereo
Auto
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Mode
Off
On
On
On
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.93)
On
On
On
On
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.97).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Configuring scene assignments
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
1
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.99) in the “Scene” menu.
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
Input selection keys
Sound
Tone Control, Adaptive DRC
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
2
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround
SCENE
Surround
SCENE
1
2
3
4
DOCK
TAG
Video
Video Mode, Video Adjustment
Master Volume
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSCENE1
ꢀSETꢀComplete
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Volume
3
HD
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
together for more than 3 seconds.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
3
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the
display window on the remote control.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.129) to register it.
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
V
V-AUX
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• MOVIE THEATER category (p.57):
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.60).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.57):
Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.
PROGRAM
ON SCREEN
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
ENTER
Cursor keys
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
a Press ON SCREEN.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
stereo playback
Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
• LIVE/CLUB category (p.58):
Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly.
PRESET
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
TV VOL
TV CH
• STEREO category (p.58):
Press STEREO repeatedly.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.100).
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback.
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.122).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.59).
INFO
MEMORY
TUN./ CH
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
SLEEP
LEVEL
SETUP
ENT
ZONE
• This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original
channels (p.59).
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Enjoying surround sound with
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3)
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or
concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
Sound program category
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀMUSIC
ꢀꢀCLASSICAL
HallꢀinꢀVienna
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.91) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front
presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence
speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear
presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front
presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
11ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce
up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We
recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more
effective stereoscopic sound field.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Sports
❑ MOVIE THEATER
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Standard
Action Game
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Roleplaying Game of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Music Video
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the
reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as
providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will
not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Adventure
Recital/Opera
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Drama
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness
of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the
live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more
exciting.
Pavilion
Disco
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also
characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.
Mono Movie
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.
Church in
Royaumont
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Chamber
❑ CLASSICAL
❑ LIVE/CLUB
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a
basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center left of the hall.
Village Gate
Hall in Munich A
Hall in Munich B
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.
Village Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a
shoe-box type concert hall with around 1300 seats. The hall is constructed
from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling
causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2400 seats located in
Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual
seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
Hall in Frankfurt
Hall in Stuttgart
Cellar Club
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2000 seats located in
downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left
of listeners has a powerful presence.
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Roxy Theatre
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Vienna
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
The Bottom Line
Arena
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Hall in Amsterdam
Hall in USA A
This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect
sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena.
This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a
fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the
American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully
reinforced.
❑ STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2600. The
ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by
longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector
suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from
the direction of the stage.
Hall in USA B
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
11ch Stereo
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate
reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for
reproducing church organ and choral music.
Church in Tokyo
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
Church in Freiburg high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
• CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.56) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”
is selected.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
Enjoying unprocessed playback
multichannel (surround decoder)
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
V
V-AUX
■ Playing back in original channels
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.145).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
(straight decode)
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
1
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀSUR.ꢀDECODE
ꢀꢀꢀProꢀLogic
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
Press STRAIGHT.
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
1
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
ENTER
bPro Logic
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
bPLIIx Movie
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
ꢀꢀꢀSTRAIGHT
VOLUME
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
L
SL SW1
SBL
C
R
SR
SBR
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.92) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
MOVIE
STEREO
STRAIGHT
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.107) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
SUR.DECODE
INFO
MEMORY
TUN./ CH
SLEEP
LEVEL
SETUP
ENT
ZONE
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
V
V-AUX
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Press PURE DIRECT.
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.93) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).
DOCK
TAG
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀPUREꢀDIRECT
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Press ENHANCER.
1
ENTER
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
– Using the multi-zone function
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀEnhancerꢀOn
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
HD
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
“ENHANCER” lights up
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.93) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
SUR
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
ENHANCER
DECODE
INFO
MEMORY
TUN./ CH
SLEEP
LEVEL
SETUP
ENT
ZONE
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Listening to FM/AM radio
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
Selecting a frequency for reception
V-AUX
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
1
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
source.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
TUNER
Press FM or AM to select a band.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
2
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ87.50MHz
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Setting the frequency steps
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
(Asia model only)
ON SCREEN
OPTION
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
3
ENTER
TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Set the unit to standby mode.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
1
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
HDMI OUT
DECODE
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
2
INFO
FM
AM
DOCK
TAG
press MAIN ZONE z.
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
TUN./CH
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Numeric keys
3
HD
SLEEP
LEVEL
SETUP
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
ZONE
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
PROGRAM
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
3
• (U.S.A. model only)
You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “Audio Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the
monaural reception mode.)
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
TUNERꢀFRQꢀSTEP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFM50/AM9
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
SLEEP
3
HD
• (Except for U.S.A. model)
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
4
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting a preset station
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
V
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
1
source.
V-AUX
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
2
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD
Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.65, p.67).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
TUNER
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
■ Registering a radio station
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
01:FMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61)
3
HD
1
ON SCREEN
OPTION
to tune into the desired radio station.
ENTER
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.63)
after tuning into the radio station.
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
LIVE
2
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65, p.67).
PRESET
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Preset number
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
01:FMꢀ98.50MHz
ꢀꢀPresetꢀOK
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
SUR
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
PL
L
C
R
PR
MEMORY
DECODE
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
INFO
TUN./ CH
Numeric keys
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
SLEEP
LEVEL
SETUP
ZONE
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
02:Empty
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program
You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD
Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).
HD Radio™ tuning
(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting
provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and
reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental
program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio
programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio Technology, visit
V
Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio
program.
You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)
directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select
program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).
1
V-AUX
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀHDꢀ2/3
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz3
ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating
CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM
broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data
(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)
from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ON SCREEN
OPTION
■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information
You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Press INFO.
1
MODE
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience
of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,
HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.
LIVE
DOCK
TAG
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.
These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as
deep cuts into traditional genre.
HD
Info
ꢀꢀꢀCategory
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
MOVIE
STEREO
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s
FM and FM sounds like a CD.
TV VOL
TV CH
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
DOCK
TAG
HD
FMꢀ88.9-1 ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
When tuning into an HD Radio station
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Relative/total program number
(when multiple programs are available)
3
HD
RhythmꢀandꢀBlu
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
Station Info
Category
Frequency, station name (call sign)
DOCK
MEMORY
TAG
HD
ꢀHDꢀ1/3
INFO
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz1
ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Station name (call sign), program category
Station name (call sign), artist name/song title
Station name (call sign), album title
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
TUN./CH
HD
Artist/Song
Album
Numeric keys
ENT
SLEEP
LEVEL
SETUP
“HD” lights up
Absolute program number
(when multiple programs are available)
ZONE
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Frequency, sound program selected on the unit
Frequency, decoder selected on the unit
• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If
you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down
TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.
• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.94), you can tune into the
analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.
• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station
or period of time.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program
number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program
category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Holding HD Radio™ information display
You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the
TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.
When the desired HD Radio information is
1
V-AUX
D
displayed, press OPTION.
3 HD indicator
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”
(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.
TUNER
2
4 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
The current information will remain displayed until
“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
OPTION
• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode
or if another input source or another radio station is selected.
Menu
Submenu
FM
Function
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Switches to FM/AM.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
3
RETURN
AM
Tuning (+/-)
Auto (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV
You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on
the TV.
LIVE
Selects a radio station automatically.
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
Manual Tuning
Selects an audio program (when
PURE
Program (+/-) multiple audio programs are
available).
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
Registers the selected station as
Memory
presets.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Direct
Enters a frequency directly.
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
❑ Playback screen
Browse
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1
2
3
4
5
Screen Off
1 HOLD indicator
Flashes when the hold function (p.64) is enabled.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
1
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
V-AUX
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
2
■
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
1
2 Preset number
ON SCREEN
OPTION
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.67).
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
Press INFO.
2
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
DECODE
Menu
Submenu
Function
INFO
TAG
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
TUN./ CH
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
Info
ꢀProgramꢀType
Memory
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
SLEEP
Automatically registers HD Radio
(FM/AM) stations and FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
ENT
Item name
LEVEL
SETUP
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Utility
ZONE
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Frequency (always displayed)
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
DOCK
TAG
1 Page Up
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
ꢀꢀꢀCLASSICS
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Moves to the previous/next page of the
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
list.
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
1 Page Down
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Information
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
Program Service Program service name
Program Type
Radio Text
Current program type
Information on the current program
Current time
Clock Time
• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1
(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,
register it manually (p.62).
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Sound mode name
Decoder name
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Operating the radio on the TV
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
V-AUX
• (U.S.A. model only)
See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.64) to operate the radio on the TV.
■ Receiving traffic information
D
automatically
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
TUNER
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
1
■ Playback screen
ON SCREEN
OPTION
OPTION
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
2
ENTER
3
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
4
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
PRESET
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
DOCK
TAG
HD
Finished
TrafficProgram
TPꢀFM101.30MHz
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.65), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Traffic information station (frequency)
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Menu
Submenu
FM
Function
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
1
Tuning (+/-)
Auto (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
V-AUX
D
Manual Tuning
Selects a radio station automatically.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Memory
Direct
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
2
Enters a frequency directly.
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Browse
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
2 Preset number
ON SCREEN
OPTION
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
Submenu
Function
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
Memory
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Utility
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iPod music
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
1
2
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To
select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.70).
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
Made for.
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation)
iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad
(as of June 2013)
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
ꢀꢀConnected
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
1
2
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
3
V-AUX
D
5
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
NET
USB
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
2 List name
ON SCREEN
OPTION
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
4 Item number/total
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
2
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Menu
Function
TV VOL
TV CH
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.70).
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playback screen
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
2
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
1
V-AUX
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
D
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
2
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Operational remote control
Function
keys
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Cursor keys
ENTER
Select an item.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Confirms the selection.
Returns to the previous screen.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
RETURN
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
a
d
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
External device
operation keys
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
MODE
s
Stops playback.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
External device
operation keys
Menu
Submenu Function
MOVIE
STEREO
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
a
s
Resumes playback from pause.
TV VOL
TV CH
Stops playback.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Play Control
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
Item
Setting
Function
MODE
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
MOVIE
STEREO
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Songs (Songs)
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
One (One)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
V-AUX
D
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
NET
USB
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
Playback of USB storage device contents
ON SCREEN
OPTION
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
• The unit does not support a USB hub.
ENTER
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
Connecting a USB storage device
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
CLUB
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
1
1
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
The unit (front)
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
USB storage device
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
2
1
2
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
3
V-AUX
D
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
2 List name
ON SCREEN
OPTION
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Menu
Function
TV VOL
TV CH
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playback screen
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
2
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
1
V-AUX
D
OPTION.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
OPTION
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Item
Setting
Function
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
External device
operation keys
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
On (On)
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
PRESET
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
MOVIE
STEREO
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
TV VOL
TV CH
One (One)
s
Repeat
(Repeat)
“c” appears on the TV screen.
Play Control
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
f
g
Skips forward/backward.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
V-AUX
D
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
1
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Media sharing setup
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
installed
TV VOL
TV CH
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
1
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
2
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
3
1
2
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
3
V-AUX
D
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.77) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
2 List name
ON SCREEN
OPTION
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Menu
Function
TV VOL
TV CH
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playback screen
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
2
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
1
V-AUX
D
press OPTION.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.77) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
OPTION
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Item
Setting
Function
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
External device
operation keys
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
On (On)
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
PRESET
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
MOVIE
STEREO
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
TV VOL
TV CH
One (One)
s
Repeat
(Repeat)
“c” appears on the TV screen.
Play Control
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
f
g
Skips forward/backward.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97).
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
1
2
V-AUX
D
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to Internet radio
En 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
■ Playback screen
1
2
1
2
3
V-AUX
D
3
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
4
1 Playback indicator
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
3 Operation menu
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
External device
operation keys
Menu
Submenu
Function
LIVE
Play Control
Browse
s
Stops playback.
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
Menu
Function
MOVIE
STEREO
Moves to the browse screen.
PURE
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
Now Playing
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal
account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.123)
in the “Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to Internet radio
En 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
iTunes
PC
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
1
Router
The unit
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
(
) appears.
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Playback starts
iPod
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information”
menu.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
2
3
with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of June 2013)
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback temporarily.
d
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.
Play Control
f
g
V-AUX
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
Skips forward/backward.
D
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.96) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Screen Off
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
■ Playback screen
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
1
2
iTunes (example of English version)
External device
operation keys
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
3
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Check this box
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in
other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room
(Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3)
and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Video (ZONE
OUT or HDMI)
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.149).
Audio
(ZONE OUT)
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone
configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best
meet your requirements.
Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Living room (main zone)
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.84
TV (for digital video playback): p.85
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.83
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
❑
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio
(ZONE OUT)
Video/audio
(HDMI)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.83
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.85
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparing the multi zone system
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an
external amplifier.
■ Connecting an external amplifier and
speakers to play back audio
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit
with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external
amplifier.
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
L
R
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
L
R
AUDIO
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back
ZONE OUT jacks
(any of COMPONENT VIDEO,
VIDEO, S VIDEO)
analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or
Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video
monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
Video input
(any of component video,
composite video, S-video)
P
R
B
P
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for
multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the
zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same
way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the
DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component
video cable.
P
R
B
P
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
V
VIDEO
V
S
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”.
S VIDEO
S
The unit (rear)
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor
for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup”
menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to
play back videos/audio
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can
enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio
Output” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back
videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you
can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the
following operations is performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to
connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.32).
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected
to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone4.
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
OUT
HDMI
2
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI
Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone
Zone4
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set
“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
■ Operating the unit from another room
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3
or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an
infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or
REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.128).
OUT
OUT
REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Infrared
signal
receiver
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
RECEIVER z
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
4
Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.
1
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated
switches.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Input selection keys
Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Playing back iPod music (p.68)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.72)
RECEIVER
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.75)
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Press RECEIVER z.
2
• Listening to Internet radio (p.78)
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.80)
ENTER
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
• You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For
details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on
the CD-ROM.
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
INFO
• When Zone3 output is enabled, the rear presence right/left channel output is
not available in the main zone.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.
TUN./ CH
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
SLEEP
Caution
ENT
LEVEL
SETUP
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.
ZONE
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.149).
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
Zone4
rooms (party mode)
The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.
V-AUX
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
SCENE
Press PARTY.
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Press SCENE.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
VOLUME
MUTE
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Setting the sleep timer
ENTER
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu.
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
ENHANCER
MEMORY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
PARTY
SLEEP
• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.
INFO
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
TUN./ CH
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
ENT
LEVEL
SETUP
ZONE
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Viewing the current status
Switching information on the front display
Input source group Item
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
V-AUX
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Press INFO.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
Info
AudioꢀDecoder
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET RADIO
3
HD
Item name
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
ENTER
Viewing the status information on the TV
DOCK
TAG
HD
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
INFO
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀAV1
ꢀꢀꢀProꢀLogic
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
Press DISPLAY.
1
Information
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status
Input source/
TUN./ CH
SLEEP
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
ENT
LEVEL
SETUP
Party mode
status
Volume
ZONE
Input source group Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
Audio format/
Decoder
Sound
mode
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned
into an HD Radio station (p.63).
CINEMA DSP status
TUNER
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.65).
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
2
PLAYBACK
➤
Viewing the current status
En 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Press OPTION.
1
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
DOCK
TAG
HD
Option
ToneꢀControl
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Item
Function
Page
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
91
Front display
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
91
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³.
91
92
92
92
92
93
93
Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
(Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Adjust
(Dialog Adjust)
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
TV screen
Input Trim
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(In.Trim)
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Volume Trim
2
(Volume Trim)
Subwoofer
Trim (SW.Trim)
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
4
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).
(Enhancer)
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
93
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
93
93
93
Video Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM
radio reception.
Audio Mode
(Audio Mode)
94
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Item
Function
Page
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
94
(U.S.A. model only)
Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is
tuned into an HD Radio station.
Settings
Hold/Unhold
(Hold/Unhold)
64
66
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
Off (Off) (default)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.71),
USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.77).
—
—
Volume: low
Volume: high
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.71),
USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.77).
On
On
Off
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Off
Input level
Input level
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
HD³ functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo).
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
Default
Settings
Bypass (Bypass)
On (On) (default)
Off (Off)
Enables CINEMA DSP HD³.
Disables CINEMA DSP HD³.
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Settings
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
Auto (Auto)
(default)
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
0
❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this
setting.
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Ideal position
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
■ Video Mode (Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Settings
Default
0.0 dB
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
(Processing)
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
(default)
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment”
(p.112) in the “Setup” menu.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.60).
Settings
1 to 6
Settings
Off (Off)
On (On)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for
one input source.
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
Auto (Auto) (default)
❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
3. Analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR])
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
Settings
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
Enables the high-resolution mode.
Always selects analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]). No sounds are
Analog (Analog)
On (On) (default)
produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO (RCA or XLR).
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.
• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).
Settings
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the
Auto (Auto) (default)
Mono (Mono)
signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.
• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
(default)
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
3
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Item
Function
Page
96
Rename/Icon Select
Decoder Mode
Changes the input source name and icon.
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
96
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
Volume Interlock
Video Out
96
96
97
The input source of the unit also changes.
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
DMC Control
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Balance Input
Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance
input to avoid sound distortion.
97
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
Input sources
■ Setup procedure
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
Settings
1
Auto (default)
DTS
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Limited (default)
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Full
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
4
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Off
Does not output video.
AV 1–7, V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Default
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
USB: V-AUX
Others: Off
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
5
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.53) using the TV screen.
Input source
SERVER
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Settings
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default)
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
■ Balance Input Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you
can avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
3
(RMS) or higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.34).
Input source
AUDIO 4
Settings
Bypass (default)
ATT.(-6dB)
Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal
level (-6dB).
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Load
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Scene menu items
Item
Function
Page
Settings
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
98
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Load
98
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
HDMI Control
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
Changes the scene name and icon.
99
99
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150).
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Detail
■ Rename/Icon Select
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
1
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with
low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and
include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Check or uncheck
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
Choices
Input
Input (p.52), Audio Select (p.93)
HDMI Output (p.52)
HDMI Output
Sound Program (p.55), Pure Direct Mode (p.110), Enhancer (p.60),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.93)
Mode
Sound
Tone Control (p.91), Adaptive DRC (p.91)
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.91), Dialogue Lift (p.92), Dialogue Level
Surround
Video
Video Mode (p.111), Video Adjustment (p.93)
Master Volume (p.52)
Volume
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.109), Delay (p.110)
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.106), PEQ Select (p.108)
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
4
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.53) for the selected scene.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
3
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound Program menu items
Item
Function
Settings
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
Liveness
0 to 10
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
■ Settings for sound programs
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Item
Function
Settings
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Time
Reverb Delay
Reverb Level
bPro Logic*,
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII
Movie),
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
bPLIIx Music* (bPLII
Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
Game*),
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
Decode Type
0% to 100%
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
Surround Initial Delay
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Room Size
0.1 to 2.0
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
Sound program Item
Function
Settings
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Decode Type
Item
Function
Settings
2ch Stereo
Direct
Auto (default), Off
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Level
Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
Panorama
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Front / Rear Balance
0 to 7 (default: 3)
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Center Width
Dimension
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Left / Right Balance
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
11ch Stereo
0 to 10 (default: 5)
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
Height Balance
Monaural Mix
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
Neo:6 Music
Center Image
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off (default), On
• Available items in “11ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
6
Press ON SCREEN.
1
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
Page
41
Auto Setup
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Setting Pattern
106
106
106
106
107
107
107
107
Setting Data Copy
Front
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Rear Presence
Configuration
Speaker
Manual Setup
Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
107
SWFR Layout
Extra Bass
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
108
108
108
108
108
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
111
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Distance
Level
Parametric EQ
Test Tone
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Enables/disables the test tone output.
Delay Enable
Auto/Manual Select
Adjustment
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
Lipsync
Dynamic Range
Max Volume
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Sound
Initial Volume
Pure Direct Mode
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).
Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
Adaptive DSP Level
VPS
DAC Digital Filter
Analog to Analog Conversion
Video Mode
Video
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu
HDMI
Item
Function
Page
113
114
114
115
115
115
116
116
117
117
117
117
117
117
118
118
118
118
118
119
119
119
119
120
120
120
121
121
122
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
IP Address
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
Selects a device to output audio.
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Network Standby
MAC Address Filter
Network Name
Main Zone Set Zone Rename
Volume
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.
Network
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Mono
Zone Scene Rename
Multi Zone
Zone Rename
Zone Scene Rename
Zone Rename
Zone4 Set
Monitor Out Assign
HDMI OUT2 Assign
Party Mode Set
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Display Set
Short Message
Wallpaper
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Function
Trigger Mode
Target Zone
Power Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack.
DC OUT
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
ECO
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Large
■ Setting Pattern
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small (default)
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Configuration
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
❑ Center
• Distance
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
• Level
Settings
• Parametric EQ
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Settings
Pattern1 (default), Pattern2
Large
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.
Small (default)
None
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
Pattern1 > 2
Pattern2 > 1
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Surround
❑ Front Presence
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Settings
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Use (default)
None
Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Large
Select this option for small speakers.
❑ Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small (default)
Settings
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
None
Use (default)
None
Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
❑ Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Settings
❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
Large x1
Large x2
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Settings
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
Normal
(default)
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x1
Use
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Reverse
Small x2 (default)
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
None
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ SWFR Layout
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Settings
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
Left + Right
Front + Rear
sides of the room.
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Monaural x2
(default)
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting while viewing the front display
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
a Press LEVEL.
❑ Extra Bass
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.
c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
Off (default)
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
On
low-frequency components.
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Manual
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
• This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front”
is set to “Small”.
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Front
■ Distance
YPAO:Natural
Through
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Does not use the equalizer.
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
Setting range
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
1
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
2
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
3
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
Configures the audio output settings.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
4
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
❑ Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
5
6
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Settings
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable (default)
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
❑ Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Setting range
■ Test Tone
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
unit via HDMI.
Auto (default)
Manual
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Settings
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Off (default)
On
Does not output test tones.
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Adjustment
■ Initial Volume
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
Off (default)
On
standby mode.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5
dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.60).
Settings
Setting range
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
Auto (default)
Default
the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,
the wall paper is displayed.
0 ms
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment
and fine adjustment.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
Settings
On (default)
Maximum (default)
Standard
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Minimum/Auto
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ VPS
Video
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front
presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence
speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.56).
Configures the video output settings.
Settings
Off
Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On (default)
• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set
“VPS” to “Off”.
■ Analog to Analog Conversion
■ DAC Digital Filter
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have
favorite sounds.
Enables/disables the video conversion (p.148) between the analog video jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO).
Settings
Settings
Off
Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation
Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks
only.
characteristics.
Slow Roll-off Type
On (default)
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
• This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2
Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
Short Latency Type
(default)
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
• Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.148).
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).
Settings
Direct (default)
Processing
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Resolution
❑ Adjustment
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can
register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
Settings
■ Setup procedure
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.
1
2
Auto (default)
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.126) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on
your TV normally.)
❑ Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
3
4
Settings
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Through (default)
16:9 Normal
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
Detail Enhancement
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50
Default
0
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50
Default
0
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Default
0
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contrast
HDMI
Adjusts the video contrast.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Default
0
Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Default
0
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.150).
Settings
Off (default)
On
Disables HDMI Control.
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–3
Default
AUDIO 1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ ARC
❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Settings
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
Enables ARC.
Off (default)
On
Disables the audio output from the TV.
Enables the audio output from the TV.
On (default)
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
❑ Standby Sync
■ Standby Through
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Off
On
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Auto (default)
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main”.
❑ Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to
the unit.
Settings
Off
Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On (default)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
7
Configures the network settings.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
Off (default)
On
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
Settings
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
Off (default)
On
Disables the MAC address filter.
Off
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
On (default)
■ Manual network settings
❑ MAC Address 1–10
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
1
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
■ Procedure
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P)
DNS Server (S)
Specifies a subnet mask.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
1
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
2
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
3
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
5
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Procedure
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Procedure
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
3
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Mono
■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
❑ Volume
Off (default)
On
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the
volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Settings
Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable (default)
■ Procedure
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Setting range
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
3
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
Off (default)
mode.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
On
increments).
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
4
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.116).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Zone4 Set
Configures the Zone4 settings.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.88) for each zone.
Choice
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Settings
You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in
“Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.117).
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Enable (default)
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.116).
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,
S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2, Zone3
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2, Zone4
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.149).
❑ Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
On
Enables the audio output.
Off (default)
Disables the audio output (video output only).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
3
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑ Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
■ Input Assignment
Default
0
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
❑ Short Message
■ Procedure
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”
Settings
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
1
On (default)
Off
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
❑ Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.
2
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Target Zone
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
❑ Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Settings
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
Power (default)
Zone2
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
Source
Zone3
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Manual
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
Zone4
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
All (default)
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
■ DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
Low
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High (default)
❑ Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT
jack.
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Settings
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
Continuous (default)
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Choices
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
Main Zone Power
Sync.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
Transmits the electronic signal.
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)
High (default)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
ECO
Configures the auto-standby setting.
Off (default)
On
Does not protect the settings.
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Icon
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
Select an on-screen menu language.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Settings
English (default)
English
Japanese
French
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
3
Italiano
Chinese
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)
En 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
Types of information
IP Address
IP address
■ Audio Signal
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P)
DNS Server (S)
MAC Address
Network Name
Status
Subnet mask
Displays information about the current audio signal.
The IP address of the default gateway
The IP address of the primary DNS server
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC address
Format
Audio format of the input signal
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE)
Channel
Input
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.116)
The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Sampling
Bitrate
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
The channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output
Dialogue
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
Output
Remote ID
TV Format
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.125)
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
The unit’s video signal type (p.125)
(Asia model only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.125)
Tuner Freq. Step
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
System ID
System ID number
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.136).
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Analog Resolution
■ HDMI Monitor
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
The volume for Zone2 or Zone3
Interface
TV interface
Volume
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)
En 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item
Function
Page
124
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
125
Set the unit to standby mode.
(Asia model only)
TUNER FRQ STEP
1
2
125
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z.
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
125
126
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
RECOV./BACKUP
126
INITIALIZE
FIRM UPDATE
VERSION
Restores the default settings.
126
127
127
Updates the firmware.
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
PROGRAM
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
3
4
5
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- REMOTEꢀSENSOR
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀON
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
The new settings take effect.
Settings
ON (default)
OFF
Turns on the remote control sensor.
Turns off the remote control sensor.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- REMOTEꢀCONꢀAMP
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
(Asia model only)
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀID1
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
TUNERꢀFRQꢀSTEP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFM50/AM9
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
SLEEP
3
HD
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
Settings
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
FM100/AM10
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Press SETUP.
1
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
ꢀPRESET
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀTVꢀFORMAT
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.
3
HD
3
4
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNTSC
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
ꢀꢀ5020
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models: NTSC
Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
5
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display
window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3.
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
6
• The registered remote control codes (p.128) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- RECOV./BACKUP
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
DOCK
TAG
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- MONITORꢀCHECK
3
HD
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBACKUP
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀYES
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.112) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
1
Choices
Settings
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
YES (default)
RECOVERY
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
SKIP
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀINITIALIZE
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀCANCEL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
VIDEO
ALL
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Does not perform an initialization.
CANCEL
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀFIRMꢀUPDATE
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
1
Choices
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
Update the firmware via the network.
NETWORK
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.136).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀꢀVERSION
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀx.xx
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Controlling external devices with the remote control
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
Registering remote control codes
V
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to
V-AUX
■
Registering the remote control code for a TV
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
Press SETUP.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
1
ꢀSETUP
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.129). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control
automatically exits from the setup menu.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
1
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER.
2
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
Item name
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
Press SETUP.
PRESET
2
MOVIE
STEREO
ꢀPRESET
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
TV z
Item
Function
Page
Assigns a function to each key by learning the code
from other remote controls.
LEARN
130
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
3
Registers the remote control code for external
devices.
PRESET
RENAME
MACRO
128
131
132
Edits the device names or scene names displayed
on the remote control’s display window.
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
ꢀPRESET
INFO
MEMORY
Programs macro operations (sequence of control
commands).
TUN./ CH
Press TV z and press ENTER.
4
CLEAR
ERASE
Clears the remote control configurations.
134
135
SLEEP
LEVEL
“----” (empty) or code currently registered
ENT
ZONE
Erases a function assigned to each key by learning.
SETUP
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.
EX-IR
—
ꢀꢀ----
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
5
6
1
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
Input selection keys
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
Press SETUP.
2
3
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
❑ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
INPUT
MUTE
Switches the video inputs of the TV.
Mutes the audio output of the TV.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
TV operation keys
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
ꢀPRESET
TV CH
Switch the channels of the TV.
Turns on/off the TV.
TV z
LIVE
Press a corresponding input selection key and
press ENTER.
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
4
5
PRESET
MOVIE
TV
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
■ Registering the remote control codes for
DIRECT
For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.
TV VOL
TV CH
TV operation keys
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
Code currently registered
ꢀꢀ5098
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
INFO
MEMORY
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control and press ENTER.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
TUN./ CH
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
Numeric keys
SLEEP
LEVEL
• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B]
or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching
the input source after pressing the key.
ZONE
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
SETUP
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE/RECEIVER
To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4
and 5.
6
7
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
V
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
V-AUX
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.54).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.
❑ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
External device
operation keys
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Press SETUP.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
1
• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
ENTER
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MODE
External device
operation keys
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and
press ENTER.
2
LIVE
L
A
S
S
I
C
A
L
AI
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
TV
STEREO
TV CH
STRAIGHT
SOURCE z
Turns on/off the playback device.
Select an item.
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
Cursor keys
ENTER
TV VOL
Menu operation
keys
TV operation keys
ꢀLEARN
Confirms a selected item.
Returns to the previous screen.
Switches information on the display.
Switches between modes.
Displays the top menu.
TV z
RETURN
DISPLAY
MODE
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
3
TOP MENU
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
s
d
Stops playback.
INFO
MEMORY
Stops playback temporarily.
For TV: press TV z.
TUN./ CH
External device
operation keys
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
a
Numeric keys
SLEEP
LEVEL
h
j
f
g
ZONE
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
SETUP
Skips forward/backward.
Numeric keys
Enter numerical values.
Control the TV (p.129).
TV operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Note
RECEIVER z
Press ENTER.
4
5
• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
a Press SETUP.
Remote control of external device
Input selection keys
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.
d Press RECEIVER z.
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.
f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
External device
operation keys
Editing device names
ON SCREEN
OPTION
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the
remote control’s display window.
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Perform the following steps (a and b) within
DISPLAY
6
MODE
10 seconds.
Press SETUP.
1
External device
operation keys
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
assign a function.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
PRESET
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys
MOVIE
TV
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
For TV: TV operation keys
TV operation keys
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and
press ENTER.
2
TV z
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned until “OK” appears in the display window.
If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.
ꢀRENAME
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are
learned.
7
8
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
Press one of the following keys to select a device or
a scene.
3
INFO
MEMORY
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
TUN./ CH
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).
Numeric keys
SLEEP
LEVEL
ZONE
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be
decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display
window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the
new functions.
For TV: press TV z.
SETUP
For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.
For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Operating multiple functions at once
(macro)
• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press
ZONE to select a zone.
The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple
functions at once.
Press ENTER.
4
5
V-AUX
For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the
CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and
start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key
operation.
Use the cursor keys to rename.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).
SCENE
To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,
SCENE
1
2
3
4
symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).
■ Enabling the macro operations
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ꢀBD/DVD
Press SETUP.
1
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
ENTER
Press ENTER to register the new name.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
Cursor keys
ENTER
6
Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”
appears in the display window.
RETURN
SUR
DISPLAY
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
2
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
INFO
To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat
Steps 3 to 6.
7
8
TUN./ CH
ꢀMACRO
SLEEP
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
ENT
LEVEL
SETUP
ZONE
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press
ENTER.
3
ꢀꢀꢀON
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
4
“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)
RECEIVER
• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By default, the following macro operations are available after
pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are
enabled.
RECEIVER z
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and
press ENTER.
3
4
Macro operations
Macro operation key
ꢀꢀEDIT
1st command
2nd commend
Input selection keys
RECEIVER z
Turns on the unit.
(unregistered)
Selects the
Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or
input selection key) to which macro operations are
assigned and press ENTER.
corresponding input
source. (unregistered
for the [A], [B] and [C]
keys)
Input selection keys
Turns on the unit.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.
■ Programming macro operations
ꢀMACROꢀ1
ON SCREEN
OPTION
You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each
macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro
operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out
sequentially according to the programmed remote control
commands.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to
include in the macro operations in sequence.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
5
To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,
press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control
codes (p.128) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.130).
PRESET
(Example)
MOVIE
STEREO
Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as
the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to
“AV1” and dturning on the TV
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
TV z
Press SETUP.
1
a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.
b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“AV1” and press SOURCE z.
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“TV” and press TV z.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
INFO
MEMORY
2
TUN./ CH
To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”
appears on the window display.
6
7
SLEEP
LEVEL
ꢀMACRO
ENT
ZONE
If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and
the setting is confirmed automatically.
SETUP
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Resetting the remote control configurations
RECEIVER z
• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.
You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.
■ Clearing the remote control configurations
You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of
settings or clear all the remote control configurations.
Press a key to which the selected process is
applied.
4
Input selection keys
Press SETUP.
1
When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the
input selection key or TV z.
SCENE
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection
key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation
key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and
press ENTER.
2
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the
window display.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
5
6
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
ꢀCLEAR
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to
be cleared and press ENTER.
3
LIVE
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
TV z
ꢀPRESET
Clears the functions learned from other remote
controls.
LEARN
PRESET
RENAME
MACRO
Restores the default remote control code settings.
Restores the default device name settings.
Clears the macro operation settings.
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
INFO
MEMORY
Clears all remote control configurations and
restores default settings.
RESET
TUN./ CH
SLEEP
LEVEL
“ALL” appears in the display window.
ENT
ZONE
SETUP
ꢀꢀALL
To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,
proceed to Step 5.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by
learning
You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and
restore the default key assignments.
Press SETUP.
Input selection keys
1
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and
press ENTER.
2
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ꢀERASE
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Press one of the following keys to select the device
3
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Press ENTER.
4
5
TV z
Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on
the window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
SUR
ENHANCER
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
DECODE
INFO
MEMORY
Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key
assignments are erased.
6
TUN./ CH
SLEEP
LEVEL
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
7
ENT
ZONE
SETUP
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
3
V-AUX
D
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Note
The firmware update is complete.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.123). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the
wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.127).
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Information
icon
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
MOVIE
STEREO
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
TV VOL
TV CH
Message
System Icon
Read the on-screen description.
1
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
En 136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.106).
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.119) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.110). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.117).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.121).
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.117).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.125).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.92).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
APPENDIX
➤
Frequently asked questions
En 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC
wall outlets securely.
b The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn on.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
The power does not turn off.
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
in the power supply voltage.
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
for the specified time.
menu to “Off” (p.121).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
in the power supply voltage.
The unit is out of the operating range.
The batteries are weak.
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).
The remote control is set to control external devices.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.125).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).
The remote control is set to control the unit.
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
Set the remote control code again (p.128). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
V-AUX.
Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.134).
Directly operate the mobile device itself.
Replace with new batteries.
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable.
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate.
Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.130).
Learning is impossible in this case.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.135).
Memory capacity is full.
Audio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123).
No sound.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
The maximum volume is set.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.110).
The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123).
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.109).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.106).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.108).
The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker
is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power
amplifier may be malfunctioning.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.92).
The extended surround is disabled.
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.108).
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.107).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.114).
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the playback device (connected to The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the unit with HDMI).
the SPEAKERS terminals.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.113).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.114). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118).
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Move the unit further away from the device.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Turn down the volume.
Noise/hum is heard.
The input signal level is too high when AUDIO 4 (XLR) is selected Adjust the output signal level on the playback device or use “Balance Input
The sound is distorted.
as the input source.
Attenuator” in the “Input” menu (p.97).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.85).
The sound is interrupted.
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.126).
No video.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.151).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The video is interrupted.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.52).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.85).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM radio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
(U.S.A. model only)
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.94).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.94).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Select the station manually (p.61).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.61).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.
model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.62).
Auto Preset has been used.
The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.
(U.S.A. model only)
The unit is in the monaural reception mode.
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.94).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.115). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.115).
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
The network feature does not function.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.75).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.115).
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.115).
Firmware update via the network is failed.
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.127).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error indications on the front display
Message
Cause
Remedy
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.75).
Access denied
Access to the PC is denied.
The unit cannot access the USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
Access error
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.
Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.68).
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37).
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
Internal Error
MHL Overloaded
No content
An internal error has occurred.
An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.
Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
No device
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
RemID Mismatch
Remote Off
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.125).
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.124).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
Unable to play
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
USB Overloaded
Version error
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Firmware update is failed.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Update the firmware again.
APPENDIX
➤
Error indications on the front display
En 144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
DTS Express
Audio information
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
■ Audio decoding format
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Dolby Digital
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
FLAC
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
DTS-ES
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
HDMI and video information
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
WAV
Deep Color
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ Others
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C
signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color
reproduction than the composite video signal system.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
CINEMA DSP HD³
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in
your room.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line)
is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”
(p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
S VIDEO VIDEO
out out
HDMI out
COMPONENT VIDEO out
480i/ 480p/
Video device
The unit
TV
480i/ 480p/
480i/
480i/
576i
Resolution
720p 1080i 1080p
4K
720p 1080i 1080p
576i
576p
m
m
576i
576p
576i
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
HDMI in
HDMI out
1080i
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
1080p/24 Hz
4K
m
m
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
,
,
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
m
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
m
m
m
1080i
1080p
S VIDEO in
S VIDEO out
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S VIDEO in 480i/576i
VIDEO in 480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
,
,
m
,
,
m
VIDEO in
VIDEO out
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-zone output
■ Audio output
■ Video output
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Out
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)
ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
jack (*7)
Out
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Zone2/3
VIDEO
In
Zone2
Zone3
Zone2 (*1)
Zone4 (*2)
In
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*3)
m (*5)
m (*3)
m (*5)
m (*4)
Zone2/3
Zone2/3
Zone2
Zone4
Digital audio
HDMI video
m
m
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
Component video
S-video
m
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
m
m
m
m
Composite video
m
USB (including iPod)
Network sources
TUNER
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
On-screen display
(browse/playback)
m (*8)
m (*8)
m (*8)
m
m: Available
m: Available
*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”
*8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Example)
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.32).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
1
2
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.113) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
(Example)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
3
Playback device
also turns off
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
4
5
6
Turn off the TV
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
Check the followings.
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.53)
If not, select the input source manually.
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.129)
APPENDIX
➤
Information on HDMI
En 150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI signal compatibility
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
7
Audio signals
Audio signal type
Audio signal format
Compatible media (example)
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
Multichannel Linear PCM
8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
HD DVD
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
DSD
2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
Dolby Digital, DTS
SACD
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Bitstream
DVD-Video
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
APPENDIX
➤
Information on HDMI
En 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United
States and/or other countries.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
x.v.Color™
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Rovi™
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
This receiver supports network connections.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
APPENDIX
➤
Trademarks
En 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
• Video
• Audio Format
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
- S-video x 1
- Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
- Component x 1
AV OUT
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
- Composite x 1
- S-video x 1
- DTS
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• HDMI Output
*5
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2
)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)
*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
• Video
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 2
• REMOTE OUT x 2
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)
Component x 4 (AV 1–4)
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
• HDMI Input
- VGA
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)
* V-AUX: MHL input compatible
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
• Others
- 576p/50 Hz
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
• DC OUT x 1
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
HDMI
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, Ultra HD (4K)
• Audio Format
- Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,
R.PRESENCE L/R)
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
- 480i/60 Hz
- Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,
R.PRESENCE L/R) (1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)
- Subwoofer Out x 2
- 576i/50 Hz
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 1 (AV OUT)
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
USB
Audio Section
• Rated Output Level/Impedance
PHONO ............................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) .......................... 200 mV/47 k
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Front L/R..............................................................1.0 V/470
Center..................................................................1.0 V/470
Surround L/R .......................................................1.0 V/470
Surround Back L/R ..............................................1.0 V/470
Front Presence L/R..............................................1.0 V/470
Rear Presence L/R ..............................................1.0 V/470
Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................1.0 V/470
Zone2/Zone3.......................................................1.0 V/470
(XLR Balance Preout)
Attenuator Off..................................................... 200 mV/47 k
Attenuator On..................................................... 400 mV/47 k
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO ..............................................................60 mV or more
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ............................2.4 V or more
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Attenuator Off.......................................................2.4 V or more
Attenuator On.......................................................4.8 V or more
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
Front L/R..............................................................2.0 V/470
Center..................................................................2.0 V/470
Surround L/R .......................................................2.0 V/470
Surround Back L/R ..............................................2.0 V/470
Front Presence L/R..............................................2.0 V/470
Rear Presence L/R ..............................................2.0 V/470
• Output Level / Output Impedance
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k
HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................+0/-3 dB
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
• Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD)
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0 0.5 dB
• Post Decoding Format
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
- Dolby Pro Logic
• Total Harmonic Distortion
Front L/R......................................................... 4.25 V or more
Center............................................................. 4.25 V or more
Surround L/R .................................................. 4.25 V or more
Surround Back L/R ......................................... 4.25 V or more
Front Presence L/R......................................... 4.25 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ......................................... 4.25 V or more
Subwoofer 1–2 ................................................. 6.8 V or more
Zone2/Zone3.................................................. 4.25 V or more
(XLR Balance Preout)
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less
MULTI CH INPUT to Preout (Pure Direct).......... 0.008% or less
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
[U.S.A., Canada, China and Taiwan models] .... 86 dB or more
[Other models]................................................... 81 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to Preout (Balance/Unbalance)
(Pure Direct, Input Shorted 1 k, Analog Input)
......................................................................... 112 dB or more
Front L/R........................................................... 8.5 V or more
Center............................................................... 8.5 V or more
Surround L/R .................................................... 8.5 V or more
Surround Back L/R ........................................... 8.5 V or more
Front Presence L/R........................................... 8.5 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ........................................... 8.5 V or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Preout (RCA Unbalance) .................................... 1.5 µV or less
Preout (XLR Balance)............................................. 3 µV or less
• Channel Separation
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................86 dB/68 dB or more
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum)
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
• Standby Power Consumption
Main Zone Preout ............................................................14 dB
Zone2/Zone3 Preout........................................................14 dB
.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ........... 0.3 W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 5.0 W (Typical)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)
.......................................................................... 4.2 W (Typical)
Network Standby On......................................... 2.2 W (Typical)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more
• Volume Control
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, 3 dB
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
• Tone Control Characteristics
FM Section
• Tuning Range
......................435 x 192 x 448 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 17-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut......................... 6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ..................... 6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia model].................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• Weight...........................................................13.6 kg (30.0 lbs)
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Bass Boost/Cut............................. 10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ........................... 10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................72 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB
• Filter Characteristics
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.3%/0.5%
HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03%
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.
• Antenna Input................................................75 unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A. and Canada models].................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia model]............................ 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
[U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models].................. NTSC
[Other models].................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL
General
• Video Signal Level
• Power Supply
Composite .............................................................1 Vp-p/75
S-video
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Taiwan model]................................AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model].............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model]....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Y..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75
C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models]
.....................................................................0.286 Vp-p/75
C (PAL) [Other models] ...................................0.3 Vp-p/75
Component
Y..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75
Pb/Pr................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75
• Power Consumption..........................................................80 W
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Audio device connection 34
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 75
Audio file format (USB storage device) 72
Cellar Club (sound program) 58
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 102
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 102
Chamber (sound program) 58
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Channel indicator (front display) 12
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 50
Church in Freiburg (sound program) 58
Church in Royaumont (sound program) 58
Church in Tokyo (sound program) 58
CINEMA DSP 3D (Option menu) 91
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 91
CINEMA DSP HD³ 56
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 58
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 67
Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 65
Clearing (remote control) 134
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 65
COAXIAL jack 22
Component video cable 22
Component video connection (video device) 32
COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22
Composite video connection (video device) 33
Compressed Music Enhancer 60
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Contrast (Video Mode, Setup menu) 113
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41
Numerics
11ch Stereo (sound program) 58
16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 112
2.1-channel system 21
Audio Mode (Option menu) 94
Audio Output (HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) 118
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 114
Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 63
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26
2ch Stereo (sound program) 58
3.1-channel system 21
5.1-channel system 20, 21
7.1-channel system 20
Audio Select (Option menu) 93
Audio Signal (Information menu) 123
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 121
Auto Preset (FM radio) 67
9.2-channel system 19, 20
A
Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 65
Access denied (error indication) 144
Access error (error indication) 144
Action Game (sound program) 57
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 91
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 110
AirPlay 80
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 109
Automatic speaker setting optimization 41
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 67
B
Backup/recovery of the settings 126
Balanced connection (power amplifier) 24
Basic playback operation 52
Album (HD Radio™) 63
AM antenna connection 36
AM radio listening 61
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114
D
Basic speaker configuration 19
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 91
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Bitstream 151
Analog to Analog Conversion
DAC Digital Filter (Sound, Setup menu) 111
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 120
DC OUT jack 13
(Video, Setup menu) 111
Angle (YPAO measurement result) 48
Angle measurement (YPAO) 44, 47
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 114
Arena (sound program) 58
Brightness (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 101
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 96
Decoder Off (front display information) 89
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 123
C
CAT-5 cable 37
Category (HD Radio™) 63
Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 63
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default setting restoration 126
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 109
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 92
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 59
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 102
Front display (part names and functions) 12
Front display brightness 119
Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 92
Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 92
Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialogue normalization level 123
Digital coaxial cable 22
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 97
DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 59
DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 59
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 92
Front display information 89
Front panel (part names and functions) 10
Front panel door (front panel) 10
Front panel jack connection 35
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Function (Setup menu) 119
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 110
E
G
ECO (Setup menu) 121
GND terminal 34
Ground lead 34
Edge Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Enhancer (Option menu) 93
ENHANCER (sound mode) 60
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 57
Erasing (remote control) 135
Error indication (front display) 144
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 92
EXTD Surround (Option menu) 92
Extended Surround (Option menu) 92
External device control (remote control) 128
H
Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) 58
Hall in Frankfurt (sound program) 58
Hall in Munich A (sound program) 58
Hall in Munich B (sound program) 58
Hall in Stuttgart (sound program) 58
Hall in USA A (sound program) 58
Hall in USA B (sound program) 58
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 58
HD Radio™ information 63
Digital optical cable 22
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 102
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 119
Direct (Sound Program menu) 102
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 145
Disco (sound program) 57
DLNA 75
HD Radio™ tuning 63
HDMI (Setup menu) 113
HDMI cable 22
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 115
HDMI connection (video device) 32
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 113
HDMI jack 22
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 123
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114
HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
HDMI output selection 52
HDMI signal compatibility 151
Headphones 56
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 102
High definition audio 151
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97
DMC Control (Input menu) 97
Firmware update (network) 127, 136
Firmware update (USB) 127
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 123
Firmware version check 127
FM antenna connection 36
FM Mode (Option menu) 94
FM radio listening 61
FM/AM radio tuning 61
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 123
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 92
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 92
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 59
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 61
Frequency step setting 61, 125
High speed HDMI cable 22
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hi-Res Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 93
LIGHT key 15
Lipsync 146
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 109
Mono (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Mono Movie (sound program) 57
MOVIE (sound program category) 57
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 57
MULTI CH INPUT jack 14
Multi measurement (YPAO) 46
Multi Zone (Information menu) 123
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 116
Multi-channel analog connection 38
Multiple room playback 82
Multi-zone 82
I
Information display (front display) 12
M
Information switching (front display) 89
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Initial Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 119
Input jack assignment 119
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 115
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 123
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 115
Macro (remote control) 132
Multi-zone output 149
MUSIC (sound program category) 58
Music Video (sound program) 57
MUTE key 15
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 116
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Manual speaker configuration 106
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 62
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Max Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Measurement result (YPAO) 48
Media sharing setup 75
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 121
Muting 52
N
Input menu 95
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 37
NAS connection 37
Input selection key (remote control) 15
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 92
Internal Error (error indication) 144
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 50
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 115
iPod charge 68
NAS content playback 75
Network (Information menu) 123
Network (Setup menu) 115
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37
Network cable 37
Network connection 37
Network information 123
iPod connection 68
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 80
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 80
MHL jack 22
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 123
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 116
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 115
No content (error indication) 144
No device (error indication) 144
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 50
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 50
No MIC (YPAO error message) 50
No R.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 50
No Signal (YPAO error message) 50
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 50
Noisy (YPAO error message) 50
Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 48
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 144
MHL-compatible mobile device 35
Microphone base 44, 47
L
MODE key 15
Language (Setup menu) 122
Learning (remote control) 130
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 102
Level (Sound Program menu) 102
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
Level (YPAO measurement result) 48
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 51
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 146
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 102
Monaural reception (FM radio) 61
Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 61
Monitor check 126
MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126
Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Numeric key (remote control) 16
Reset (remote control) 134
Reset (Scene menu) 99
Q
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 101
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 101
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 101
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 48
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 57
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101
Router connection 37
O
R
ON SCREEN key 15
OPTION key 15
Option menu 90
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 51
Rear Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Recital/Opera (sound program) 57
Recording device connection 38
RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 144
REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Remote connection 86
S
P
S VIDEO jack 22
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 102
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
PARTY key 16
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Saturation (Video Mode, Setup menu) 113
Save (Scene menu) 98
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 50
Scene configuration 54
SCENE function 53
SCENE link playback 54
Scene menu 97
Sci-Fi (sound program) 57
Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Setup menu 103
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 119
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 71
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 77
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 74
Signal information 123
SILENT CINEMA 56
Simple play (iPod) 70
Single measurement (YPAO) 44
Size (YPAO measurement result) 48
SLEEP key 16
Remote control (part names and functions) 15
Remote control code registration
Party mode 88
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
Pavilion (sound program) 57
PC connection 37
PC content playback 75
PHONES jack 11
(playback device) 129
Remote control code registration (TV) 128
Remote Control Code Search 128, 129
Remote control ID setting 125
Remote control ID setting (remote control) 125
REMOTE IN jack 13
REMOTE OUT jack 13
REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 124
Rename (device name on the remote control) 131
Rename (input name) 96
Rename (network name) 116
Rename (scene name) 99
Power amplifier connection 24
Power management 121
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 120
PRE OUT (RCA) jack 14
PRE OUT (XLR) jack 14
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 62
Program Service (Radio Data System) 65
Program Type (Radio Data System) 65
Pure Direct 60
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 60
Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Sleep timer 16
Sleep timer (Zone2/Zone3/Zone4) 88
Sound (Setup menu) 109
Sound field effect 56
Sound mode selection 55
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 96
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 99
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 71
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 77
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 74
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound program 57, 58
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 93
SWFR Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
USB Overloaded (error indication) 144
USB storage device connection 72
USB storage device content playback 72
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 50
Sound Program menu 100
T
V
The Bottom Line (sound program) 58
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 58
Tone Control (Option menu) 91
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 127
Version error (error indication) 144
Video (Setup menu) 111
Standby indicator (front panel) 10
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 114
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 114
Station Info (HD Radio™) 63
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 62
Status (Network, Information menu) 123
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 58
Stereo pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable) 22
Stereo reception (FM radio) 61
Video Adjust (Option menu) 93
Video Adjustment (Option menu) 93
VIDEO AUX jack 11
Video device connection 32
VIDEO jack 22
Video Mode (Option menu) 93
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 111
Video Out (Input menu) 96
Video pin cable 22
Video Signal (Information menu) 123
Video signal flow 148
Video signal type setting 125
Village Gate (sound program) 58
Village Vanguard (sound program) 58
Virtual CINEMA DSP 56
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 56
Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 96
Volume Trim (Option menu) 92
VPS (Sound, Setup menu) 111
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 56
TONE/BALANCE key 11
TP (Traffic Program) 66
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 66
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 66
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 91
Trigger function 39
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 120
TRIGGER OUT jack 13
Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 120
Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 120
Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 123
Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 61
STP network cable 37
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 59
Straight decode 59
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 123
Subwoofer 1 (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Subwoofer connection 25
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29
TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
TV Format (System, Information menu) 123
TV operation (remote control) 129
TV operation key (remote control) 15
Surround Back Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101
W
Surround Back Room Size
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 119
Warehouse Loft (sound program) 58
Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 48
(Sound Program menu) 101
Surround decoder 59
U
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101
S-video cable 22
Ultra HD (4K) 151
X
Unable to play (error indication) 144
Unbalanced connection (power amplifier) 25
USB jack 11
XLR balanced cable 23
XLR jack 23
S-video connection (video device) 33
USB mass storage class device 72
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 41
YPAO error message 50
YPAO MIC jack 11
YPAO microphone 41
YPAO warning message 51
Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 116
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 118
Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Scene Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Scene Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 118
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 117
Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 117
Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF484A0/EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|